1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2025 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 */ 222 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 224 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 230 }; 231 232 /** 233 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 234 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 235 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 236 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 237 */ 238 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 239 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 240 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 241 }; 242 243 /** 244 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 245 * 246 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 247 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 248 * 249 * @def: the channel definition 250 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 251 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 252 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 253 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 254 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 255 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 256 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 257 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 258 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 259 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 260 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 261 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 262 */ 263 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 264 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 265 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 266 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 267 268 int radio_idx; 269 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 270 271 bool radar_enabled; 272 273 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 274 }; 275 276 /** 277 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 278 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 279 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 280 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 281 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 282 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 283 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 284 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 285 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 286 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 287 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 288 * for changes/removal.) 289 */ 290 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 291 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 292 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 293 }; 294 295 /** 296 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 297 * 298 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 299 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 300 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 301 * done. 302 * 303 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 304 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 305 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 306 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 307 */ 308 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 310 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 311 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 312 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 313 }; 314 315 /** 316 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 317 * 318 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 319 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 320 * 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 322 * also implies a change in the AID. 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 324 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 326 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 329 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 330 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 332 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 334 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 339 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 346 * changed 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 348 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 350 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 351 * context had been assigned. 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 353 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 355 * keep alive) changed. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 357 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 358 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 362 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 364 * status changed. 365 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 368 */ 369 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 370 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 371 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 372 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 373 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 375 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 376 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 377 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 378 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 379 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 380 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 381 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 383 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 384 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 385 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 386 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 387 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 388 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 389 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 390 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 391 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 392 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 393 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 394 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 395 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 396 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 398 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 399 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 400 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 401 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 402 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 403 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 404 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 405 406 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 407 }; 408 409 /* 410 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 411 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 412 * filtering will be disabled. 413 */ 414 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 415 416 /** 417 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 418 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 419 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 420 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 421 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 422 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 423 * once each time the timeout triggers. 424 */ 425 enum ieee80211_event_type { 426 RSSI_EVENT, 427 MLME_EVENT, 428 BAR_RX_EVENT, 429 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 430 }; 431 432 /** 433 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 434 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 435 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 436 */ 437 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 438 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 439 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 440 }; 441 442 /** 443 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 444 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 445 */ 446 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 447 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 448 }; 449 450 /** 451 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 452 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 453 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 454 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 455 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 456 */ 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 458 AUTH_EVENT, 459 ASSOC_EVENT, 460 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 461 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 462 }; 463 464 /** 465 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 466 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 467 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 468 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 469 */ 470 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 471 MLME_SUCCESS, 472 MLME_DENIED, 473 MLME_TIMEOUT, 474 }; 475 476 /** 477 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 478 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 479 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 480 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 481 */ 482 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 483 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 484 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 485 u16 reason; 486 }; 487 488 /** 489 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 490 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 491 * @tid: the tid 492 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 493 */ 494 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 496 u16 tid; 497 u16 ssn; 498 }; 499 500 /** 501 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 502 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 503 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 504 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 505 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 506 * @u:union holding the fields above 507 */ 508 struct ieee80211_event { 509 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 510 union { 511 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 512 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 513 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 514 } u; 515 }; 516 517 /** 518 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 519 * 520 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 521 * 522 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 523 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 526 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 527 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 532 * 533 * @lci: LCI subelement content 534 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 535 * @lci_len: LCI data length 536 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 537 */ 538 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 539 const u8 *lci; 540 const u8 *civicloc; 541 size_t lci_len; 542 size_t civicloc_len; 543 }; 544 545 /** 546 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 547 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 548 * 549 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 550 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 551 */ 552 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 553 u32 min_interval; 554 u32 max_interval; 555 }; 556 557 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 558 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 559 bool valid; 560 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 561 u8 count; 562 }; 563 564 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 565 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 566 bool valid; 567 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 568 u8 count, n; 569 }; 570 571 /** 572 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 573 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 574 * (indexed by TX power category) 575 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 576 * 160, 320 MHz each 577 * (indexed by TX power category) 578 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 579 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 580 * (indexed by TX power category) 581 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 582 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 583 * (indexed by TX power category) 584 */ 585 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 586 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 587 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 588 }; 589 590 /** 591 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 592 * 593 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 594 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 595 * 596 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 597 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 598 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 599 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 600 * responses. 601 * @addr: (link) address used locally 602 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 603 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 604 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 605 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 606 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 607 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 608 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 609 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 610 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 611 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 612 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 613 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 614 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 615 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 616 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 617 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 618 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 619 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 620 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 621 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 622 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 623 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 624 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 625 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 626 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 627 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 628 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 629 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 630 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 631 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 632 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 633 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 634 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 635 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 636 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 637 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 638 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 639 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 640 * the current band. 641 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 642 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 643 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 644 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 645 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 646 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 647 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 648 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 649 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 650 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 651 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 652 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 653 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 654 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 655 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 656 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 657 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 658 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 659 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 660 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 661 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 662 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 663 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 664 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 665 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 666 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 667 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 668 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 669 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 670 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 671 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 672 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 673 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 674 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 675 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 676 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 677 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 678 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 679 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 680 * station. 681 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 682 * responder functionality. 683 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 684 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 685 * @tx_bss_conf: Pointer to the BSS configuration of transmitting interface 686 * if MBSSID is enabled. This pointer is RCU-protected due to CSA finish 687 * and BSS color change flows accessing it. 688 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 689 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 690 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 691 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 692 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 693 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 694 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 695 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 696 * connected to (STA) 697 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 698 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 699 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 700 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 701 * interval. 702 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 703 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 704 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 705 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 706 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 707 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 708 * @epcs_support: does this BSS support EPCS 709 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 710 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 711 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 712 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 713 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 714 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 715 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 716 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 717 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 718 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 719 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 720 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 721 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 722 * beamformer 723 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 724 * beamformee 725 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 726 * beamformer 727 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 728 * beamformee 729 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 730 * beamformer 731 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 732 * beamformee 733 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 734 * beamformer 735 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 736 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 737 * bandwidth 738 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 739 * beamformer 740 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 741 * beamformee 742 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 743 * beamformer 744 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 745 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 746 * bandwidth 747 * @eht_disable_mcs15: disable EHT-MCS 15 reception capability. 748 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 749 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 750 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 751 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 752 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 753 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 754 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 755 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 756 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 757 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 758 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 759 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 760 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 761 */ 762 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 763 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 764 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 765 766 const u8 *bssid; 767 unsigned int link_id; 768 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 769 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 770 bool uora_exists; 771 u8 uora_ocw_range; 772 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 773 bool he_support; 774 bool twt_requester; 775 bool twt_responder; 776 bool twt_protected; 777 bool twt_broadcast; 778 /* erp related data */ 779 bool use_cts_prot; 780 bool use_short_preamble; 781 bool use_short_slot; 782 bool enable_beacon; 783 u8 dtim_period; 784 u16 beacon_int; 785 u16 assoc_capability; 786 u64 sync_tsf; 787 u32 sync_device_ts; 788 u8 sync_dtim_count; 789 u32 basic_rates; 790 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 791 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 792 u16 ht_operation_mode; 793 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 794 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 795 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 796 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 797 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 798 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 799 bool qos; 800 bool hidden_ssid; 801 int txpower; 802 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 803 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 804 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 805 u16 max_idle_period; 806 bool protected_keep_alive; 807 bool ftm_responder; 808 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 809 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 810 bool nontransmitted; 811 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *tx_bss_conf; 812 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 813 u8 bssid_index; 814 u8 bssid_indicator; 815 bool ema_ap; 816 u8 profile_periodicity; 817 struct { 818 u32 params; 819 u16 nss_set; 820 } he_oper; 821 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 822 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 823 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 824 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 825 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 826 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 827 828 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 829 830 u8 pwr_reduction; 831 bool eht_support; 832 bool epcs_support; 833 bool csa_active; 834 835 bool mu_mimo_owner; 836 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 837 838 bool color_change_active; 839 u8 color_change_color; 840 841 bool ht_ldpc; 842 bool vht_ldpc; 843 bool he_ldpc; 844 bool vht_su_beamformer; 845 bool vht_su_beamformee; 846 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 847 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 848 bool he_su_beamformer; 849 bool he_su_beamformee; 850 bool he_mu_beamformer; 851 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 852 bool eht_su_beamformer; 853 bool eht_su_beamformee; 854 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 855 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 856 bool eht_disable_mcs15; 857 858 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 859 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 860 }; 861 862 /** 863 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 864 * 865 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 866 * 867 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 868 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 869 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 870 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 871 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 872 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 873 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 874 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 875 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 876 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 877 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 878 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 879 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 880 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 881 * station 882 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 883 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 884 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 885 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 886 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 887 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 888 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 889 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 890 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 891 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 892 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 893 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 894 * hardware queue. 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 896 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 897 * is for the whole aggregation. 898 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 899 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 901 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 902 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 903 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 904 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 905 * off-channel operation. 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 907 * (header conversion) 908 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 909 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 910 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 911 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 912 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 913 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 914 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 915 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 916 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 917 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 918 * queue gets full. 919 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 920 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 921 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 922 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 923 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 924 * should kick the MLME state machine. 925 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 926 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 927 * status to user space) 928 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 929 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 930 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 931 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 932 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 933 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 934 * handled properly by the device. 935 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 936 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 937 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 938 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 939 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 940 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 941 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 942 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 943 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 944 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 945 * PS-Poll responses. 946 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 947 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 948 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 949 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 950 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 951 * monitor injection). 952 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 953 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 954 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 955 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 956 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 957 * 958 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 959 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 960 */ 961 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 962 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 963 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 964 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 965 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 966 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 967 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 968 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 969 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 970 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 971 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 972 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 973 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 974 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 975 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 976 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 977 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 978 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 979 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 980 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 981 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 982 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 983 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 984 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 985 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 986 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 987 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 988 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 989 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 990 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 991 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 992 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 993 }; 994 995 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 996 997 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 998 999 /** 1000 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 1001 * 1002 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 1003 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 1004 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 1005 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 1006 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1008 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1009 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1011 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1012 * it can be sent out. 1013 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1014 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1016 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1017 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1018 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1019 * for sequence number assignment 1020 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1021 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1022 * operation on the interface. 1023 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1024 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1025 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1026 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1027 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1028 * it's intended for an MLD. 1029 * 1030 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1031 */ 1032 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1033 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1034 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1035 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1036 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1037 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1038 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1039 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1040 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1041 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1042 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1043 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1044 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1045 }; 1046 1047 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1048 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1049 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1050 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1051 1052 /** 1053 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1054 * 1055 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1056 * 1057 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1058 */ 1059 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1060 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1061 }; 1062 1063 /* 1064 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1065 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1066 */ 1067 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1068 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1069 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1070 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1071 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1072 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1073 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1074 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1075 1076 /** 1077 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1078 * Rate Control algorithm. 1079 * 1080 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1081 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1082 * 1083 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1084 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1085 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1086 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1087 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1088 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1089 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1090 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1091 * Greenfield mode. 1092 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1093 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1094 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1095 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1096 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1097 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1098 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1099 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1100 */ 1101 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1102 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1105 1106 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1107 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1108 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1109 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1110 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1111 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1112 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1113 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1114 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1115 }; 1116 1117 1118 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1119 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1120 1121 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1122 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1123 1124 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1125 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1126 1127 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1128 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1129 1130 /** 1131 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1132 * 1133 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1134 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1135 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1136 * 1137 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1138 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1139 * 1140 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1141 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1142 * 1143 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1144 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1145 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1146 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1147 * information:: 1148 * 1149 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1150 * 1151 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1152 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1153 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1154 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1155 * information should then contain:: 1156 * 1157 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1158 * 1159 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1160 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1161 */ 1162 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1163 s8 idx; 1164 u16 count:5, 1165 flags:11; 1166 } __packed; 1167 1168 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1169 1170 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1171 { 1172 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1173 } 1174 1175 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1176 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1177 { 1178 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1179 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1180 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1181 } 1182 1183 static inline u8 1184 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1185 { 1186 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1187 } 1188 1189 static inline u8 1190 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1191 { 1192 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1193 } 1194 1195 /** 1196 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1197 * 1198 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1199 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1200 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1201 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1202 * 1203 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1204 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1205 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1206 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1207 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1208 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1209 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1210 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1211 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1212 * @control: union part for control data 1213 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1214 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1215 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1216 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1217 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1218 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1219 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1220 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1221 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1222 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1223 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1224 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1225 * @pad: padding 1226 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1227 * @status: union part for status data 1228 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1229 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1230 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1231 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1232 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1233 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1234 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1235 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1236 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1237 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1238 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1239 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1240 */ 1241 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1242 /* common information */ 1243 u32 flags; 1244 u32 band:3, 1245 status_data_idr:1, 1246 status_data:13, 1247 hw_queue:4, 1248 tx_time_est:10; 1249 /* 1 free bit */ 1250 1251 union { 1252 struct { 1253 union { 1254 /* rate control */ 1255 struct { 1256 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1257 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1258 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1259 u8 use_rts:1; 1260 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1261 u8 short_preamble:1; 1262 u8 skip_table:1; 1263 1264 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1265 u8 antennas:2; 1266 1267 /* 14 bits free */ 1268 }; 1269 /* only needed before rate control */ 1270 unsigned long jiffies; 1271 }; 1272 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1273 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1274 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1275 u32 flags; 1276 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1277 } control; 1278 struct { 1279 u64 cookie; 1280 } ack; 1281 struct { 1282 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1283 s32 ack_signal; 1284 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1285 u8 ampdu_len; 1286 u8 antenna; 1287 u8 pad; 1288 u16 tx_time; 1289 u8 flags; 1290 u8 pad2; 1291 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1292 } status; 1293 struct { 1294 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1295 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1296 u8 pad[4]; 1297 1298 void *rate_driver_data[ 1299 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1300 }; 1301 void *driver_data[ 1302 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1303 }; 1304 }; 1305 1306 static inline u16 1307 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1308 { 1309 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1310 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1311 */ 1312 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1313 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1314 } 1315 1316 static inline u16 1317 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1318 { 1319 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1320 } 1321 1322 /*** 1323 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1324 * 1325 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1326 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1327 * 1328 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1329 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1330 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1331 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1332 * that was used when sending the packet. 1333 */ 1334 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1335 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1336 u8 try_count; 1337 u8 tx_power_idx; 1338 }; 1339 1340 /** 1341 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1342 * 1343 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1344 * @info: Basic tx status information 1345 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1346 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1347 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1348 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1349 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1350 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1351 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1352 */ 1353 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1354 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1355 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1356 struct sk_buff *skb; 1357 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1358 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1359 u8 n_rates; 1360 1361 struct list_head *free_list; 1362 }; 1363 1364 /** 1365 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1366 * 1367 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1368 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1369 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1370 * 1371 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1372 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1373 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1374 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1375 */ 1376 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1377 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1378 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1379 const u8 *common_ies; 1380 size_t common_ie_len; 1381 }; 1382 1383 1384 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1385 { 1386 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1387 } 1388 1389 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1390 { 1391 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1392 } 1393 1394 /** 1395 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1396 * 1397 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1398 * 1399 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1400 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1401 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1402 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1403 * 1404 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1405 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1406 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1407 */ 1408 static inline void 1409 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1410 { 1411 int i; 1412 1413 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1414 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1415 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1416 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1417 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1418 /* clear the rate counts */ 1419 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1420 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1421 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1422 } 1423 1424 1425 /** 1426 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1427 * 1428 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1429 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1430 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1431 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1432 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1433 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1434 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1435 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1436 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1437 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1438 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1439 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1440 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1441 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1442 * de-duplication by itself. 1443 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1444 * the frame. 1445 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1446 * the frame. 1447 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1448 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1449 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1450 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1451 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1452 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1453 * merging. 1454 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1455 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1456 * (including FCS) was received. 1457 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1458 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1459 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1460 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1461 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1462 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1463 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1464 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1465 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1466 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1467 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1468 * each A-MPDU 1469 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1470 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1471 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1472 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1473 * on this subframe 1474 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1475 * done by the hardware 1476 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1477 * processing it in any regular way. 1478 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1479 * them for sniffing purposes. 1480 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1481 * monitor interfaces. 1482 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1483 * them for sniffing purposes. 1484 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1485 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1486 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1487 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1488 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1489 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1490 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1491 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1492 * interleaved with other frames. 1493 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1494 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1495 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1496 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1497 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1498 * in the skb. 1499 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1500 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1501 * the first subframe. 1502 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1503 * be done in the hardware. 1504 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1505 * frame 1506 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1507 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1508 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1509 * 1510 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1511 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1512 * - DATA3_CODING 1513 * - DATA5_GI 1514 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1515 * - DATA6_NSTS 1516 * - DATA3_STBC 1517 * 1518 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1519 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1520 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1521 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1522 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1523 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1524 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1525 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1526 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1527 * hardware or driver) 1528 */ 1529 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1530 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1531 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1532 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1533 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1534 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1535 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1536 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1537 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1538 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1539 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1540 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1541 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1542 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1543 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1544 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1545 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1546 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1547 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1548 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1549 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1550 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1551 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1552 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1553 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1554 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1555 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1556 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1557 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1558 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1559 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1560 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1561 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1562 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1563 }; 1564 1565 /** 1566 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1567 * 1568 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1569 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1570 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1571 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1572 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1573 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1574 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1575 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1576 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1577 */ 1578 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1579 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1580 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1581 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1582 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1583 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1584 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1585 }; 1586 1587 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1588 1589 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1590 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1591 RX_ENC_HT, 1592 RX_ENC_VHT, 1593 RX_ENC_HE, 1594 RX_ENC_EHT, 1595 }; 1596 1597 /** 1598 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1599 * 1600 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1601 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1602 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1603 * 1604 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1605 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1606 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1607 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1608 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1609 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1610 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1611 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1612 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1613 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1614 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1615 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1616 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1617 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1618 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1619 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1620 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1621 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1622 * values were filled. 1623 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1624 * support dB or unspecified units) 1625 * @antenna: antenna used 1626 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1627 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1628 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1629 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1630 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1631 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1632 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1633 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1634 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1635 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1636 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1637 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1638 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1639 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1640 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1641 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1642 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1643 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1644 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1645 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1646 * @link_valid. 1647 */ 1648 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1649 u64 mactime; 1650 union { 1651 u64 boottime_ns; 1652 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1653 }; 1654 u32 device_timestamp; 1655 u32 ampdu_reference; 1656 u32 flag; 1657 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1658 u8 enc_flags; 1659 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1660 union { 1661 struct { 1662 u8 he_ru:3; 1663 u8 he_gi:2; 1664 u8 he_dcm:1; 1665 }; 1666 struct { 1667 u8 ru:4; 1668 u8 gi:2; 1669 } eht; 1670 }; 1671 u8 rate_idx; 1672 u8 nss; 1673 u8 rx_flags; 1674 u8 band; 1675 u8 antenna; 1676 s8 signal; 1677 u8 chains; 1678 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1679 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1680 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1681 }; 1682 1683 static inline u32 1684 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1685 { 1686 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1687 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1688 } 1689 1690 /** 1691 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1692 * 1693 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1694 * 1695 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1696 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1697 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1698 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1699 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1700 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1701 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1702 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1703 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1704 * for more. 1705 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1706 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1707 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1708 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1709 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1710 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1711 * operating channel. 1712 */ 1713 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1714 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1715 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1716 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1717 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1718 }; 1719 1720 1721 /** 1722 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1723 * 1724 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1725 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1726 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1727 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1728 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1729 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1730 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1731 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1732 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1733 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1734 */ 1735 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1736 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1737 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1738 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1739 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1740 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1741 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1742 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1743 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1744 }; 1745 1746 /** 1747 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1748 * 1749 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1750 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1751 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1752 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1753 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1754 */ 1755 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1756 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1757 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1758 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1759 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1760 1761 /* keep last */ 1762 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1763 }; 1764 1765 /** 1766 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1767 * 1768 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1769 * 1770 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1771 * 1772 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1773 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1774 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1775 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1776 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1777 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1778 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1779 * 1780 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1781 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1782 * 1783 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1784 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1785 * 1786 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1787 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1788 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1789 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1790 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1791 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1792 * 1793 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1794 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1795 * configured for an HT channel. 1796 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1797 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1798 */ 1799 struct ieee80211_conf { 1800 u32 flags; 1801 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1802 1803 u16 listen_interval; 1804 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1805 1806 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1807 1808 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1809 bool radar_enabled; 1810 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1811 }; 1812 1813 /** 1814 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1815 * 1816 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1817 * operation. 1818 * 1819 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1820 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1821 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1822 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1823 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1824 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1825 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1826 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1827 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1828 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1829 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1830 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1831 * channel, expressed in TU. 1832 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1833 */ 1834 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1835 u64 timestamp; 1836 u32 device_timestamp; 1837 bool block_tx; 1838 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1839 u8 count; 1840 u8 link_id; 1841 u32 delay; 1842 }; 1843 1844 /** 1845 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1846 * 1847 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1848 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1849 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1850 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1851 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1852 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1853 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1854 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1855 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1856 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1857 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1858 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1859 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1860 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1861 * enabled for the interface. 1862 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 1863 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 1864 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 1865 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 1866 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 1867 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 1868 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 1869 */ 1870 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1871 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1872 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1873 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1874 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1875 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 1876 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 1877 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 1878 }; 1879 1880 1881 /** 1882 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1883 * 1884 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1885 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1886 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1887 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1888 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1889 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1890 * mac80211. 1891 */ 1892 1893 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1894 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1895 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1896 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1897 }; 1898 1899 /** 1900 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1901 * @assoc: association status 1902 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1903 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1904 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1905 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1906 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1907 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 1908 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 1909 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 1910 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 1911 * Figure 9-1001k 1912 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1913 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1914 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1915 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1916 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1917 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1918 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1919 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1920 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1921 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1922 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1923 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1924 * your driver/device needs to do. 1925 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1926 * (station mode only) 1927 */ 1928 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1929 /* association related data */ 1930 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1931 bool ibss_creator; 1932 bool ps; 1933 u16 aid; 1934 u16 eml_cap; 1935 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 1936 u16 mld_capa_op; 1937 1938 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1939 int arp_addr_cnt; 1940 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1941 size_t ssid_len; 1942 bool s1g; 1943 bool idle; 1944 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1945 }; 1946 1947 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 1948 1949 /** 1950 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 1951 * 1952 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 1953 * this TID is not included. 1954 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 1955 * TID is not included. 1956 * @valid: info is valid or not. 1957 */ 1958 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 1959 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1960 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1961 bool valid; 1962 }; 1963 1964 /** 1965 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 1966 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 1967 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 1968 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 1969 */ 1970 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 1971 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 1972 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 1973 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 1974 }; 1975 1976 /** 1977 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1978 * 1979 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1980 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1981 * 1982 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1983 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1984 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1985 * or the BSS we're associated to 1986 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1987 * indexed by link ID 1988 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1989 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1990 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1991 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1992 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 1993 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 1994 * 0 for non-MLO. 1995 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 1996 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 1997 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 1998 * 0 for non-MLO. 1999 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 2000 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 2001 * @addr: address of this interface 2002 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 2003 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 2004 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 2005 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 2006 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 2007 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2008 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2009 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2010 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2011 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2012 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2013 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2014 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2015 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2016 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2017 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2018 * restrictions. 2019 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2020 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2021 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2022 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2023 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2024 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2025 * interface. 2026 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2027 * for this interface. 2028 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2029 * sizeof(void \*). 2030 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2031 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2032 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2033 */ 2034 struct ieee80211_vif { 2035 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2036 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2037 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2038 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2039 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2040 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2041 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2042 bool addr_valid; 2043 bool p2p; 2044 2045 u8 cab_queue; 2046 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2047 2048 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2049 2050 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2051 u32 driver_flags; 2052 u32 offload_flags; 2053 2054 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2055 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2056 #endif 2057 2058 bool probe_req_reg; 2059 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2060 2061 /* must be last */ 2062 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2063 }; 2064 2065 /** 2066 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2067 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2068 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2069 */ 2070 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2071 { 2072 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2073 } 2074 2075 /** 2076 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2077 * @vif: the vif 2078 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2079 */ 2080 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2081 { 2082 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2083 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2084 } 2085 2086 /** 2087 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2088 * @vif: the vif 2089 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2090 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2091 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2092 */ 2093 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2094 unsigned int link_id) 2095 { 2096 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2097 return link_id == 0; 2098 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2099 } 2100 2101 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2102 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2103 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2104 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2105 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2106 2107 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2108 { 2109 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2110 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2111 #endif 2112 return false; 2113 } 2114 2115 /** 2116 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2117 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2118 * 2119 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2120 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2121 * 2122 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2123 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2124 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2125 */ 2126 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2127 2128 /** 2129 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2130 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2131 * 2132 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2133 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2134 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2135 * 2136 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2137 */ 2138 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2139 2140 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2141 { 2142 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2143 } 2144 2145 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2146 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2147 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2148 2149 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2150 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2151 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2152 2153 /** 2154 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2155 * 2156 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2157 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2158 * 2159 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2160 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2161 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2162 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2163 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2164 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2165 * generation in software. 2166 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2167 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2168 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2169 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2170 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2171 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2172 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2173 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2174 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2175 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2176 * MIC. 2177 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2178 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2179 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2180 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2181 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2182 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2183 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2184 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2185 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2186 * only for management frames (MFP). 2187 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2188 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2189 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2190 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2191 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2192 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2193 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2194 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2195 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2196 * number generation only 2197 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2198 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2199 */ 2200 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2201 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2202 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2203 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2204 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2205 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2206 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2207 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2208 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2209 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2210 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2211 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2212 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2213 }; 2214 2215 /** 2216 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2217 * 2218 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2219 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2220 * 2221 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2222 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2223 * encrypted in hardware. 2224 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2225 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2226 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2227 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2228 * @keyidx: the key index (0-7) 2229 * @keylen: key material length 2230 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2231 * data block: 2232 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2233 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2234 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2235 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2236 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2237 * @link_id: the link ID, 0 for non-MLO, or -1 for pairwise keys 2238 */ 2239 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2240 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2241 u32 cipher; 2242 u8 icv_len; 2243 u8 iv_len; 2244 u8 hw_key_idx; 2245 s8 keyidx; 2246 u16 flags; 2247 s8 link_id; 2248 u8 keylen; 2249 u8 key[]; 2250 }; 2251 2252 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2253 2254 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2255 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2256 2257 /** 2258 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2259 * 2260 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2261 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2262 * reverse order than in packet) 2263 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2264 * reverse order than in packet) 2265 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2266 * reverse order than in packet) 2267 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2268 * reverse order than in packet) 2269 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2270 */ 2271 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2272 union { 2273 struct { 2274 u32 iv32; 2275 u16 iv16; 2276 } tkip; 2277 struct { 2278 u8 pn[6]; 2279 } ccmp; 2280 struct { 2281 u8 pn[6]; 2282 } aes_cmac; 2283 struct { 2284 u8 pn[6]; 2285 } aes_gmac; 2286 struct { 2287 u8 pn[6]; 2288 } gcmp; 2289 struct { 2290 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2291 u8 seq_len; 2292 } hw; 2293 }; 2294 }; 2295 2296 /** 2297 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2298 * 2299 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2300 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2301 * 2302 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2303 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2304 */ 2305 enum set_key_cmd { 2306 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2307 }; 2308 2309 /** 2310 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2311 * 2312 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2313 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2314 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2315 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2316 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2317 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2318 */ 2319 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2320 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2321 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2322 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2323 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2324 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2325 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2326 }; 2327 2328 /** 2329 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2330 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2331 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2332 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2333 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2334 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2335 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2336 * 2337 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2338 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2339 */ 2340 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2341 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2342 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2343 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2344 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2345 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2346 }; 2347 2348 #define IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_MAX IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320 2349 2350 /** 2351 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2352 * 2353 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2354 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2355 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2356 */ 2357 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2358 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2359 struct { 2360 s8 idx; 2361 u8 count; 2362 u8 count_cts; 2363 u8 count_rts; 2364 u16 flags; 2365 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2366 }; 2367 2368 /** 2369 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2370 * 2371 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2372 * 2373 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2374 * to the STA. 2375 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2376 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2377 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2378 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2379 * per peer TPC. 2380 */ 2381 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2382 s16 power; 2383 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2384 }; 2385 2386 /** 2387 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2388 * 2389 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2390 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2391 * 2392 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2393 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2394 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2395 * 2396 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2397 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2398 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2399 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2400 * 2401 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2402 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2403 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2404 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2405 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2406 */ 2407 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2408 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2409 2410 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2411 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2412 }; 2413 2414 /** 2415 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2416 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2417 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2418 * 2419 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2420 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2421 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2422 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2423 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2424 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2425 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2426 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2427 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2428 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2429 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2430 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2431 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2432 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2433 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2434 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2435 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2436 * the station moves to associated state. 2437 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2438 * 2439 */ 2440 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2441 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2442 2443 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2444 u8 link_id; 2445 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2446 2447 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2448 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2449 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2450 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2451 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2452 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2453 2454 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2455 2456 u8 rx_nss; 2457 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2458 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2459 }; 2460 2461 /** 2462 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2463 * 2464 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2465 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2466 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2467 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2468 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2469 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2470 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2471 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2472 * 2473 * @addr: MAC address 2474 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2475 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2476 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2477 * Can be modified by driver. 2478 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2479 * otherwise always false) 2480 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2481 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2482 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2483 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2484 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2485 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2486 * @rates: rate control selection table 2487 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2488 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2489 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2490 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2491 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2492 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2493 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2494 * unlimited. 2495 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities of this MLO station 2496 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2497 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2498 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2499 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2500 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2501 * is used for non-data frames 2502 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2503 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2504 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2505 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2506 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2507 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2508 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2509 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2510 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2511 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2512 * by the AP. 2513 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2514 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2515 */ 2516 struct ieee80211_sta { 2517 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2518 u16 aid; 2519 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2520 bool wme; 2521 u8 uapsd_queues; 2522 u8 max_sp; 2523 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2524 bool tdls; 2525 bool tdls_initiator; 2526 bool mfp; 2527 bool mlo; 2528 bool spp_amsdu; 2529 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2530 u16 eml_cap; 2531 2532 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2533 2534 bool support_p2p_ps; 2535 2536 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2537 2538 u16 valid_links; 2539 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2540 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2541 2542 /* must be last */ 2543 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2544 }; 2545 2546 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2547 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2548 #else 2549 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2550 { 2551 return true; 2552 } 2553 #endif 2554 2555 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2556 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2557 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2558 2559 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2560 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2561 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2562 2563 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2564 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2565 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2566 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2567 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2568 2569 /** 2570 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2571 * 2572 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2573 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2574 * 2575 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2576 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2577 */ 2578 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2579 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2580 }; 2581 2582 /** 2583 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2584 * 2585 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2586 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2587 */ 2588 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2590 }; 2591 2592 /** 2593 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2594 * 2595 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2596 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2597 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2598 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2599 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2600 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2601 * 2602 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2603 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2604 */ 2605 struct ieee80211_txq { 2606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2607 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2608 u8 tid; 2609 u8 ac; 2610 2611 /* must be last */ 2612 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2613 }; 2614 2615 /** 2616 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2617 * 2618 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2619 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2620 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2621 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2622 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2623 * 2624 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2625 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2626 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2627 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2628 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2629 * algorithm. 2630 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2631 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2632 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2633 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2634 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2635 * CCK frames. 2636 * 2637 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2638 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2639 * the FCS at the end. 2640 * 2641 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2642 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2643 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2644 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2645 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2646 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2647 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2648 * 2649 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2650 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2651 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2652 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2653 * 2654 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2655 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2656 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2657 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2658 * 2659 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2660 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2661 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2662 * 2663 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2664 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2665 * 2666 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2667 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2668 * 2669 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2670 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2671 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2672 * 2673 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2674 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2675 * 2676 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2677 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2678 * 2679 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2680 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2681 * the stack. 2682 * 2683 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2684 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2685 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2686 * 2687 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2688 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2689 * dtim_period). 2690 * 2691 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2692 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2693 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2694 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2695 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2696 * only in that case. 2697 * 2698 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2699 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2700 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2701 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2702 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2703 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2704 * 2705 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2706 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2707 * software. 2708 * 2709 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2710 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2711 * active interfaces. 2712 * 2713 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2714 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2715 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2716 * channels. 2717 * 2718 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2719 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2720 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2721 * 2722 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2723 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2724 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2725 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2726 * supported cipher suites. 2727 * 2728 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2729 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2730 * for frames. 2731 * 2732 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2733 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2734 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2735 * control for more details. 2736 * 2737 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2738 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2739 * 2740 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2741 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2742 * is supported. 2743 * 2744 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2745 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2746 * 2747 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2748 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2749 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2750 * 2751 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2752 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2753 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2754 * CSA frame. 2755 * 2756 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2757 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2758 * 2759 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2760 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2761 * 2762 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2763 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2764 * 2765 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2766 * within A-MPDU. 2767 * 2768 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2769 * for sent beacons. 2770 * 2771 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2772 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2773 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2774 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2775 * 2776 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2777 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2778 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2779 * timeout. 2780 * 2781 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2782 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2783 * 2784 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2785 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2786 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2787 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2788 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2789 * 2790 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2791 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2792 * 2793 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2794 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2795 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2796 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2797 * 2798 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2799 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2800 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2801 * 2802 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2803 * TDLS links. 2804 * 2805 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2806 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2807 * 2808 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2809 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2810 * 2811 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2812 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2813 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2814 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2815 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2816 * 2817 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2818 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2819 * TXQs to start with. 2820 * 2821 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2822 * length in tx status information 2823 * 2824 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2825 * 2826 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2827 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2828 * 2829 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2830 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2831 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2832 * 2833 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2834 * offload 2835 * 2836 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2837 * offload 2838 * 2839 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2840 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2841 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2842 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2843 * the stack. 2844 * 2845 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2846 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2847 * 2848 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2849 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2850 * 2851 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 2852 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2853 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ: HW requires disabling puncturing in 2854 * EHT in 5 GHz and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2855 * 2856 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 2857 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 2858 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 2859 * link is switching. 2860 * 2861 * @IEEE80211_HW_STRICT: strictly enforce certain things mandated by the spec 2862 * but otherwise ignored/worked around for interoperability. This is a 2863 * HW flag so drivers can opt in according to their own control, e.g. in 2864 * testing. 2865 * 2866 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2867 */ 2868 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2869 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2870 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2871 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2872 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2873 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2874 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2875 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2876 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2877 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2878 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2879 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2880 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2881 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2882 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 2883 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2884 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2885 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2886 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2887 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2888 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2889 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2890 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2891 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2892 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2893 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2894 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2895 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2896 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2897 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2898 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2899 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2900 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2901 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2902 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2903 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2904 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2905 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2906 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2907 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2908 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2909 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2910 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2911 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2912 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2913 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2914 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2915 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2916 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2917 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2918 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2919 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2920 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2921 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2922 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2923 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 2924 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ, 2925 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 2926 IEEE80211_HW_STRICT, 2927 2928 /* keep last, obviously */ 2929 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2930 }; 2931 2932 /** 2933 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2934 * 2935 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2936 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2937 * 2938 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2939 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2940 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2941 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2942 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2943 * 2944 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2945 * 2946 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2947 * along with this structure. 2948 * 2949 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2950 * 2951 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2952 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2953 * 2954 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2955 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2956 * 2957 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2958 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2959 * 2960 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2961 * that HW supports 2962 * 2963 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2964 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2965 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2966 * 2967 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2968 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2969 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2970 * 2971 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2972 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2973 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2974 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2975 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2976 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2977 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2978 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2979 * 2980 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2981 * can handle. 2982 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2983 * the hw can report back. 2984 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2985 * 2986 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2987 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2988 * aggregation. 2989 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2990 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2991 * it shouldn't be set. 2992 * 2993 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2994 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2995 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2996 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2997 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2998 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2999 * 3000 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 3001 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 3002 * 3003 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 3004 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 3005 * 3006 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 3007 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 3008 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 3009 * adding _BW is supported today. 3010 * 3011 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 3012 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 3013 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 3014 * 3015 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3016 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3017 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3018 * device_timestamp. 3019 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3020 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3021 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3022 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3023 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3024 * 3025 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3026 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3027 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3028 * 3029 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3030 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3031 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3032 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3033 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3034 * neither enabled. 3035 * 3036 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3037 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3038 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3039 * 3040 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3041 * device. 3042 * 3043 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3044 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3045 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3046 * 3047 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3048 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3049 * 3050 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3051 * 3052 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3053 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3054 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3055 * 3056 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3057 */ 3058 struct ieee80211_hw { 3059 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3060 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3061 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3062 void *priv; 3063 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3064 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3065 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3066 int vif_data_size; 3067 int sta_data_size; 3068 int chanctx_data_size; 3069 int txq_data_size; 3070 u16 queues; 3071 u16 max_listen_interval; 3072 s8 max_signal; 3073 u8 max_rates; 3074 u8 max_report_rates; 3075 u8 max_rate_tries; 3076 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3077 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3078 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3079 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3080 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3081 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3082 struct { 3083 int units_pos; 3084 s16 accuracy; 3085 } radiotap_timestamp; 3086 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3087 u8 uapsd_queues; 3088 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3089 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3090 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3091 u8 weight_multiplier; 3092 u32 max_mtu; 3093 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3094 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3095 }; 3096 3097 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3098 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3099 { 3100 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3101 } 3102 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3103 3104 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3105 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3106 { 3107 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3108 } 3109 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3110 3111 /** 3112 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3113 * 3114 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3115 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3116 */ 3117 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3118 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3119 3120 /* Keep last */ 3121 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3122 }; 3123 3124 /** 3125 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3126 * 3127 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3128 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3129 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3130 * @status: channel-switch response status 3131 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3132 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3133 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3134 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3135 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3136 */ 3137 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3138 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3139 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3140 u8 action_code; 3141 u32 status; 3142 u32 timestamp; 3143 u16 switch_time; 3144 u16 switch_timeout; 3145 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3146 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3147 }; 3148 3149 /** 3150 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3151 * 3152 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3153 * 3154 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3155 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3156 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3157 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3158 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3159 * 3160 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3161 */ 3162 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3163 3164 /** 3165 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3166 * 3167 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3168 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3169 */ 3170 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3171 { 3172 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3173 } 3174 3175 /** 3176 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3177 * 3178 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3179 * @addr: the address to set 3180 */ 3181 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3182 { 3183 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3184 } 3185 3186 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3187 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3188 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3189 { 3190 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3191 return NULL; 3192 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3193 } 3194 3195 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3196 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3197 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3198 { 3199 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3200 return NULL; 3201 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3202 } 3203 3204 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3205 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3206 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3207 { 3208 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3209 return NULL; 3210 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3211 } 3212 3213 /** 3214 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3215 * @hw: the hardware 3216 * @skb: the skb 3217 * 3218 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3219 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3220 */ 3221 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3222 3223 /** 3224 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3225 * @hw: the hardware 3226 * @skbs: the skbs 3227 * 3228 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3229 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3230 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3231 * relevant locks to use it. 3232 */ 3233 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3234 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3235 3236 /** 3237 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3238 * 3239 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3240 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3241 * 3242 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3243 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3244 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3245 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3246 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3247 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3248 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3249 * 3250 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3251 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3252 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3253 * 3254 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3255 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3256 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3257 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3258 * 3259 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3260 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3261 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3262 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3263 * 3264 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3265 * 3266 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3267 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3268 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3269 * based on the receive flags. 3270 * 3271 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3272 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3273 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3274 * keys. 3275 * 3276 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3277 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3278 * handler. 3279 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3280 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3281 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3282 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3283 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3284 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3285 * 3286 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3287 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3288 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3289 * 3290 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3291 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3292 * requirements: 3293 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3294 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3295 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3296 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3297 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3298 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3299 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3300 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3301 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3302 */ 3303 3304 /** 3305 * DOC: Powersave support 3306 * 3307 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3308 * 3309 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3310 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3311 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3312 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3313 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3314 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3315 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3316 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3317 * 3318 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3319 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3320 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3321 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3322 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3323 * 3324 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3325 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3326 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3327 * 3328 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3329 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3330 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3331 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3332 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3333 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3334 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3335 * 3336 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3337 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3338 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3339 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3340 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3341 * periods. 3342 * 3343 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3344 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3345 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3346 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3347 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3348 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3349 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3350 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3351 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3352 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3353 * 3354 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3355 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3356 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3357 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3358 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3359 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3360 * 3361 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3362 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3363 */ 3364 3365 /** 3366 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3367 * 3368 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3369 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3370 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3371 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3372 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3373 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3374 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3375 * 3376 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3377 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3378 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3379 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3380 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3381 * 3382 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3383 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3384 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3385 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3386 * 3387 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3388 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3389 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3390 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3391 * 3392 * - a list of information element IDs 3393 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3394 * 3395 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3396 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3397 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3398 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3399 * vendor information elements. 3400 * 3401 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3402 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3403 * 3404 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3405 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3406 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3407 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3408 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3409 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3410 * 3411 * 3412 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3413 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3414 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3415 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3416 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3417 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3418 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3419 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3420 * 3421 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3422 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3423 * signal strength threshold checking. 3424 */ 3425 3426 /** 3427 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3428 * 3429 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3430 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3431 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3432 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3433 * 3434 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3435 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3436 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3437 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3438 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3439 * hardware flags. 3440 * 3441 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3442 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3443 * turned off otherwise. 3444 * 3445 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3446 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3447 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3448 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3449 */ 3450 3451 /** 3452 * DOC: Frame filtering 3453 * 3454 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3455 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3456 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3457 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3458 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3459 * 3460 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3461 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3462 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3463 * 3464 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3465 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3466 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3467 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3468 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3469 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3470 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3471 * 3472 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3473 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3474 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3475 * or dropped. 3476 * 3477 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3478 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3479 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3480 * the flag, but not clear it. 3481 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3482 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3483 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3484 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3485 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3486 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3487 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3488 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3489 */ 3490 3491 /** 3492 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3493 * 3494 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3495 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3496 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3497 * 3498 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3499 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3500 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3501 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3502 * the driver code. 3503 * 3504 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3505 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3506 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3507 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3508 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3509 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3510 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3511 * 3512 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3513 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3514 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3515 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3516 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3517 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3518 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3519 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3520 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3521 * @sta_notify callback. 3522 * 3523 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3524 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3525 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3526 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3527 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3528 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3529 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3530 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3531 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3532 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3533 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3534 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3535 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3536 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3537 * 3538 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3539 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3540 * 3541 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3542 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3543 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3544 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3545 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3546 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3547 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3548 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3549 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3550 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3551 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3552 * 3553 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3554 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3555 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3556 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3557 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3558 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3559 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3560 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3561 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3562 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3563 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3564 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3565 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3566 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3567 * 3568 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3569 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3570 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3571 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3572 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3573 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3574 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3575 * 3576 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3577 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3578 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3579 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3580 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3581 * 3582 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3583 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3584 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3585 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3586 */ 3587 3588 /** 3589 * DOC: HW queue control 3590 * 3591 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3592 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3593 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3594 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3595 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3596 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3597 * 3598 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3599 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3600 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3601 * 3602 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3603 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3604 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3605 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3606 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3607 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3608 * the hardware queue. 3609 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3610 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3611 * 3612 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3613 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3614 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3615 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3616 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3617 * 3618 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3619 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3620 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3621 * off-channel queue: 9 3622 * 3623 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3624 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3625 * 3626 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3627 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3628 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3629 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3630 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3631 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3632 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3633 * 3634 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3635 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3636 * 3637 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3638 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3639 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3640 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3641 */ 3642 3643 /** 3644 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3645 * 3646 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3647 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3648 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3649 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3650 * 3651 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3652 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3653 * multicast address. 3654 * 3655 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3656 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3657 * 3658 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3659 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3660 * 3661 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3662 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3663 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3664 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3665 * honour this flag if possible. 3666 * 3667 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3668 * station 3669 * 3670 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3671 * 3672 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3673 * 3674 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3675 * 3676 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3677 */ 3678 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3679 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3680 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3681 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3682 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3683 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3684 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3685 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3686 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3687 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3688 }; 3689 3690 /** 3691 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3692 * 3693 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3694 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3695 * 3696 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3697 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3698 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3699 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3700 * 3701 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3702 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3703 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3704 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3705 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3706 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3707 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3708 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3709 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3710 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3711 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3712 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3713 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3714 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3715 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3716 * session is gone and removes the station. 3717 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3718 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3719 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3720 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3721 */ 3722 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3723 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3724 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3725 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3726 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3727 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3728 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3729 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3730 }; 3731 3732 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3733 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3734 3735 /** 3736 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3737 * 3738 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3739 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3740 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3741 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3742 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3743 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3744 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3745 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3746 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3747 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3748 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3749 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3750 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3751 */ 3752 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3753 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3754 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3755 u16 tid; 3756 u16 ssn; 3757 u16 buf_size; 3758 bool amsdu; 3759 u16 timeout; 3760 }; 3761 3762 /** 3763 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3764 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3765 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3766 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3767 */ 3768 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3769 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3770 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3771 }; 3772 3773 /** 3774 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3775 * 3776 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3777 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3778 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3779 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3780 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3781 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3782 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3783 * the peer. 3784 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3785 * by the peer 3786 */ 3787 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3788 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3789 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3790 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3791 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3792 }; 3793 3794 /** 3795 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3796 * 3797 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3798 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3799 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3800 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3801 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3802 * 3803 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3804 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3805 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3806 */ 3807 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3808 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3809 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3810 }; 3811 3812 /** 3813 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3814 * 3815 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3816 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3817 * 3818 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3819 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3820 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3821 * of wowlan configuration) 3822 */ 3823 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3824 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3825 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3826 }; 3827 3828 /** 3829 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3830 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3831 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3832 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3833 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3834 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3835 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3836 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 3837 * while just having been associated 3838 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 3839 * 0 for a non-MLO connection. 3840 */ 3841 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3842 u16 duration; 3843 u16 subtype; 3844 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 3845 int link_id; 3846 }; 3847 3848 /** 3849 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3850 * 3851 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3852 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3853 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3854 * 3855 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3856 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3857 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3858 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3859 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3860 * Must be atomic. 3861 * 3862 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3863 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3864 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3865 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3866 * or zero. 3867 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3868 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3869 * is added. 3870 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3871 * 3872 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3873 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3874 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3875 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3876 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3877 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3878 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3879 * 3880 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3881 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3882 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3883 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3884 * reconfigured at resume time. 3885 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3886 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3887 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3888 * must return 1 from this function. 3889 * 3890 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3891 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3892 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3893 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3894 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3895 * 3896 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3897 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3898 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3899 * in suspend(). 3900 * 3901 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3902 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3903 * and @stop must be implemented. 3904 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3905 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3906 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3907 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3908 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3909 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3910 * 3911 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3912 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3913 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3914 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3915 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3916 * 3917 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3918 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3919 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3920 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3921 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3922 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3923 * MAC address of the device going away. 3924 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3925 * 3926 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3927 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3928 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3929 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3930 * 3931 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3932 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3933 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3934 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3935 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3936 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3937 * can sleep. 3938 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3939 * are not implemented. 3940 * 3941 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3942 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3943 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3944 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3945 * The callback can sleep. 3946 * 3947 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3948 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3949 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3950 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3951 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3952 * non-MLO connections. 3953 * The callback can sleep. 3954 * 3955 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3956 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3957 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3958 * 3959 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3960 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3961 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3962 * 3963 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3964 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3965 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3966 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3967 * which flags are changed. 3968 * This callback can sleep. 3969 * 3970 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3971 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3972 * 3973 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3974 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3975 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3976 * is enabled. 3977 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3978 * The callback can sleep. 3979 * 3980 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3981 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3982 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3983 * The callback must be atomic. 3984 * 3985 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3986 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3987 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3988 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3989 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3990 * 3991 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3992 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3993 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3994 * 3995 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3996 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3997 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3998 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3999 * that power save is disabled. 4000 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 4001 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 4002 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 4003 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 4004 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 4005 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 4006 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 4007 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 4008 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 4009 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 4010 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 4011 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 4012 * The callback can sleep. 4013 * 4014 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4015 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4016 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4017 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4018 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4019 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4020 * The callback can sleep. 4021 * 4022 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4023 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4024 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4025 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4026 * 4027 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4028 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4029 * 4030 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4031 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4032 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4033 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4034 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4035 * 4036 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4037 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4038 * this notification. 4039 * The callback can sleep. 4040 * 4041 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4042 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4043 * The callback can sleep. 4044 * 4045 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4046 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4047 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4048 * The callback must be atomic. 4049 * 4050 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4051 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4052 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4053 * should be set as well. 4054 * The callback can sleep. 4055 * 4056 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4057 * The callback can sleep. 4058 * 4059 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4060 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4061 * 4062 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4063 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4064 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4065 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4066 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4067 * This callback can sleep. 4068 * 4069 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4070 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4071 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4072 * 4073 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4074 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4075 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4076 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4077 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4078 * 4079 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4080 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4081 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4082 * callback can sleep. 4083 * 4084 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4085 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4086 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4087 * callback can sleep. 4088 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4089 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4090 * 4091 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4092 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4093 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4094 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4095 * 4096 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4097 * power for the station. 4098 * This callback can sleep. 4099 * 4100 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4101 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4102 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4103 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4104 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4105 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4106 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4107 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4108 * The callback can sleep. 4109 * 4110 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4111 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4112 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4113 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4114 * in @sta_state. 4115 * The callback can sleep. 4116 * 4117 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4118 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4119 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4120 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4121 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4122 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4123 * Must be atomic. 4124 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4125 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4126 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4127 * 4128 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4129 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4130 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4131 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4132 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4133 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4134 * The callback can sleep. 4135 * 4136 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4137 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4138 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4139 * The callback can sleep. 4140 * 4141 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4142 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4143 * required function. 4144 * The callback can sleep. 4145 * 4146 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4147 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4148 * required function. 4149 * The callback can sleep. 4150 * 4151 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4152 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4153 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4154 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4155 * The callback can sleep. 4156 * 4157 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4158 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4159 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4160 * TSF synchronization. 4161 * The callback can sleep. 4162 * 4163 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4164 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4165 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4166 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4167 * The callback can sleep. 4168 * 4169 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4170 * 4171 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4172 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4173 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4174 * The callback can sleep. 4175 * 4176 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4177 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4178 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4179 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4180 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4181 * 4182 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4183 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4184 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4185 * 4186 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4187 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4188 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4189 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4190 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4191 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4192 * The callback can sleep. 4193 * 4194 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4195 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4196 * The callback can sleep. 4197 * 4198 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4199 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4200 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4201 * completion of the channel switch. 4202 * 4203 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4204 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4205 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4206 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4207 * 4208 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4209 * 4210 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4211 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4212 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4213 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4214 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4215 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4216 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4217 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4218 * must be accepted in this case. 4219 * This callback may sleep. 4220 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4221 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4222 * 4223 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4224 * 4225 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4226 * 4227 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4228 * queues before entering power save. 4229 * 4230 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4231 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4232 * The callback can sleep. 4233 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4234 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4235 * The callback must be atomic. 4236 * 4237 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4238 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4239 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4240 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4241 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4242 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4243 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4244 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4245 * more-data bit must always be set. 4246 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4247 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4248 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4249 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4250 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4251 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4252 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4253 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4254 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4255 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4256 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4257 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4258 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4259 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4260 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4261 * This callback must be atomic. 4262 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4263 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4264 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4265 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4266 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4267 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4268 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4269 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4270 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4271 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4272 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4273 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4274 * This callback must be atomic. 4275 * 4276 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4277 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4278 * expected to return a static value. 4279 * 4280 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4281 * 4282 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4283 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4284 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4285 * expected to return a static value. 4286 * 4287 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4288 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4289 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4290 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4291 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4292 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4293 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4294 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4295 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4296 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4297 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4298 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4299 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4300 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4301 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4302 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4303 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4304 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4305 * 4306 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4307 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4308 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4309 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4310 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4311 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4312 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4313 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4314 * 4315 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4316 * This callback may sleep. 4317 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4318 * This callback may sleep. 4319 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4320 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4321 * channel context with different settings 4322 * This callback may sleep. 4323 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4324 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4325 * This callback may sleep. 4326 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4327 * unbound from vif. 4328 * This callback may sleep. 4329 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4330 * another, as specified in the list of 4331 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4332 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4333 * This callback may sleep. 4334 * 4335 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4336 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4337 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4338 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4339 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4340 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4341 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4342 * 4343 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4344 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4345 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4346 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4347 * This callback may sleep. 4348 * 4349 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4350 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4351 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4352 * 4353 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4354 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4355 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4356 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4357 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4358 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4359 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4360 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4361 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4362 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4363 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4364 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4365 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4366 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4367 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4368 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4369 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4370 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4371 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4372 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4373 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4374 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4375 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4376 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4377 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4378 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4379 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4380 * 4381 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4382 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4383 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4384 * 4385 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4386 * and hardware limits. 4387 * 4388 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4389 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4390 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4391 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4392 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4393 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4394 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4395 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4396 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4397 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4398 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4399 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4400 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4401 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4402 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4403 * the function call. 4404 * 4405 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4406 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4407 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4408 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4409 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4410 * 4411 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4412 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4413 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4414 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4415 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4416 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4417 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4418 * changed parameters. 4419 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4420 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4421 * this call. 4422 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4423 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4424 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4425 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4426 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4427 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4428 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4429 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4430 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4431 * 4432 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4433 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4434 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4435 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4436 * This callback may sleep. 4437 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4438 * This callback may sleep. 4439 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4440 * 4-address mode 4441 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4442 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4443 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4444 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4445 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4446 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4447 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4448 * twt structure. 4449 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4450 * from the peer. 4451 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4452 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4453 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4454 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4455 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4456 * radar channel. 4457 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4458 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4459 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4460 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4461 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4462 * supported by the driver. 4463 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4464 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4465 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4466 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4467 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4468 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4469 * This callback can sleep. 4470 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4471 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4472 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4473 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4474 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4475 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4476 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4477 * that. 4478 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4479 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4480 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4481 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4482 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4483 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4484 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4485 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4486 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4487 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4488 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4489 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4490 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4491 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4492 */ 4493 struct ieee80211_ops { 4494 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4495 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4496 struct sk_buff *skb); 4497 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4498 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4499 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4500 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4501 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4502 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4503 #endif 4504 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4506 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4508 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4509 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4511 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4512 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4514 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4515 u64 changed); 4516 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4518 u64 changed); 4519 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4521 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4522 u64 changed); 4523 4524 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4525 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4526 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4527 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4528 4529 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4530 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4531 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4532 unsigned int changed_flags, 4533 unsigned int *total_flags, 4534 u64 multicast); 4535 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4537 unsigned int filter_flags, 4538 unsigned int changed_flags); 4539 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4540 bool set); 4541 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4542 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4543 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4544 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4545 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4546 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4547 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4548 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4549 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4550 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4551 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4552 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4554 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4555 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4556 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4558 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4560 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4561 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4562 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4564 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4565 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4566 const u8 *mac_addr); 4567 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4568 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4569 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4570 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4571 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4572 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4573 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4574 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4575 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4576 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4577 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4578 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4579 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4580 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4581 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4582 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4583 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4584 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4585 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4586 struct dentry *dir); 4587 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4590 struct dentry *dir); 4591 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4592 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4593 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4594 struct dentry *dir); 4595 #endif 4596 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4597 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4598 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4600 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4601 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4603 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4604 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4605 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4607 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4608 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4610 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4611 u32 changed); 4612 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4613 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4614 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4615 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4617 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4618 struct station_info *sinfo); 4619 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4621 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4622 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4623 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4624 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4625 u64 tsf); 4626 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4627 s64 offset); 4628 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4629 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4630 4631 /** 4632 * @ampdu_action: 4633 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4634 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4635 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4636 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4637 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4638 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4639 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4640 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4641 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4642 * 4643 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4644 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4645 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4646 * 4647 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4648 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4649 * 4650 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4651 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4652 * - ``TX: 81`` 4653 * 4654 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4655 * 4656 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4657 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4658 * if the session can start immediately. 4659 * 4660 * The callback can sleep. 4661 */ 4662 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4663 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4664 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4665 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4666 struct survey_info *survey); 4667 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4668 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4669 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4670 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4671 void *data, int len); 4672 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4673 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4674 void *data, int len); 4675 #endif 4676 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4677 u32 queues, bool drop); 4678 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4679 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4680 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4681 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4682 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4683 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4684 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4685 4686 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4688 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4689 int duration, 4690 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4691 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4692 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4693 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4694 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4695 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4696 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4697 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4698 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4699 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4700 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4701 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4702 4703 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4704 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4705 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4706 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4707 bool more_data); 4708 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4709 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4710 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4711 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4712 bool more_data); 4713 4714 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4715 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4716 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4717 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4718 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4719 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4720 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4721 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4722 4723 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4725 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4726 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4728 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4729 4730 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4732 unsigned int link_id); 4733 4734 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4735 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4736 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4737 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4738 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4739 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4740 u32 changed); 4741 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4743 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4744 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4745 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4746 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4747 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4748 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4749 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4750 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4751 int n_vifs, 4752 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4753 4754 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4755 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4756 4757 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4758 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4759 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4760 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4761 #endif 4762 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4763 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4764 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4765 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4766 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4767 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4768 4769 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4771 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4772 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4774 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4775 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4777 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4778 4779 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4780 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4781 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4782 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4783 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4784 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 4785 4786 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4787 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4788 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4789 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4790 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4791 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4792 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4793 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4794 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4796 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4797 4798 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4799 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4800 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4801 4802 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4804 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4805 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4806 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4807 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4809 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4810 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4812 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4813 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4815 u8 instance_id); 4816 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4817 struct sk_buff *head, 4818 struct sk_buff *skb); 4819 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4821 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4822 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4823 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4824 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4825 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4826 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4827 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4829 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4830 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4832 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4833 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4835 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4836 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4837 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4838 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4839 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4842 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4843 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4844 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4845 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4846 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4847 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4848 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4849 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4850 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4851 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4852 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4853 struct net_device_path *path); 4854 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4855 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4856 u16 active_links); 4857 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4859 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4860 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4861 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4862 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4863 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4864 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4865 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4866 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4867 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4868 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4870 struct net_device *dev, 4871 enum tc_setup_type type, 4872 void *type_data); 4873 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 4874 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4875 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 4876 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4877 enum nl80211_iftype type); 4878 }; 4879 4880 /** 4881 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4882 * 4883 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4884 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4885 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4886 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4887 * @priv_data_len. 4888 * 4889 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4890 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4891 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4892 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4893 * 4894 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4895 */ 4896 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4897 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4898 const char *requested_name); 4899 4900 /** 4901 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4902 * 4903 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4904 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4905 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4906 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4907 * @priv_data_len. 4908 * 4909 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4910 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4911 * 4912 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4913 */ 4914 static inline 4915 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4916 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4917 { 4918 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4919 } 4920 4921 /** 4922 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4923 * 4924 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4925 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4926 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4927 * 4928 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4929 * 4930 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4931 */ 4932 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4933 4934 /** 4935 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4936 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4937 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4938 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4939 */ 4940 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4941 int throughput; 4942 int blink_time; 4943 }; 4944 4945 /** 4946 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4947 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4948 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4949 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4950 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4951 */ 4952 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4953 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4954 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4955 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4956 }; 4957 4958 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4959 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4960 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4961 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4962 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4963 const char * 4964 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4965 unsigned int flags, 4966 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4967 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4968 #endif 4969 /** 4970 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4971 * 4972 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4973 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4974 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4975 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4976 * 4977 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4978 * 4979 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4980 */ 4981 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4982 { 4983 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4984 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4985 #else 4986 return NULL; 4987 #endif 4988 } 4989 4990 /** 4991 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4992 * 4993 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4994 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4995 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4996 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4997 * 4998 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4999 * 5000 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5001 */ 5002 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5003 { 5004 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5005 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 5006 #else 5007 return NULL; 5008 #endif 5009 } 5010 5011 /** 5012 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 5013 * 5014 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5015 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5016 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5017 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5018 * 5019 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5020 * 5021 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5022 */ 5023 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5024 { 5025 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5026 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5027 #else 5028 return NULL; 5029 #endif 5030 } 5031 5032 /** 5033 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5034 * 5035 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5036 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5037 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5038 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5039 * 5040 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5041 * 5042 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5043 */ 5044 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5045 { 5046 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5047 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5048 #else 5049 return NULL; 5050 #endif 5051 } 5052 5053 /** 5054 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5055 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5056 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5057 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5058 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5059 * 5060 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5061 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5062 * 5063 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5064 */ 5065 static inline const char * 5066 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5067 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5068 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5069 { 5070 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5071 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5072 blink_table_len); 5073 #else 5074 return NULL; 5075 #endif 5076 } 5077 5078 /** 5079 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5080 * 5081 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5082 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5083 * 5084 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5085 */ 5086 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5087 5088 /** 5089 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5090 * 5091 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5092 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5093 * before calling this function. 5094 * 5095 * @hw: the hardware to free 5096 */ 5097 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5098 5099 /** 5100 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5101 * 5102 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5103 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5104 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5105 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5106 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5107 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5108 * 5109 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5110 */ 5111 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5112 5113 /** 5114 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5115 * 5116 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5117 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5118 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5119 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5120 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5121 * 5122 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5123 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5124 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5125 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5126 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5127 * 5128 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5129 * 5130 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5131 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5132 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5133 * @list: the destination list 5134 */ 5135 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5136 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5137 5138 /** 5139 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5140 * 5141 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5142 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5143 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5144 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5145 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5146 * 5147 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5148 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5149 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5150 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5151 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5152 * 5153 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5154 * 5155 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5156 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5157 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5158 * @napi: the NAPI context 5159 */ 5160 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5161 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5162 5163 /** 5164 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5165 * 5166 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5167 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5168 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5169 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5170 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5171 * 5172 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5173 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5174 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5175 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5176 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5177 * 5178 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5179 * 5180 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5181 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5182 */ 5183 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5184 { 5185 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5186 } 5187 5188 /** 5189 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5190 * 5191 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5192 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5193 * 5194 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5195 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5196 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5197 * 5198 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5199 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5200 */ 5201 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5202 5203 /** 5204 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5205 * 5206 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5207 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5208 * 5209 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5210 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5211 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5212 * 5213 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5214 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5215 */ 5216 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5217 struct sk_buff *skb) 5218 { 5219 local_bh_disable(); 5220 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5221 local_bh_enable(); 5222 } 5223 5224 /** 5225 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5226 * 5227 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5228 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5229 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5230 * 5231 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5232 * 5233 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5234 * each other. 5235 * 5236 * @sta: currently connected sta 5237 * @start: start or stop PS 5238 * 5239 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5240 */ 5241 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5242 5243 /** 5244 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5245 * (in process context) 5246 * 5247 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5248 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5249 * applies. 5250 * 5251 * @sta: currently connected sta 5252 * @start: start or stop PS 5253 * 5254 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5255 */ 5256 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5257 bool start) 5258 { 5259 int ret; 5260 5261 local_bh_disable(); 5262 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5263 local_bh_enable(); 5264 5265 return ret; 5266 } 5267 5268 /** 5269 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5270 * @sta: currently connected station 5271 * 5272 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5273 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5274 * connected station was received. 5275 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5276 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5277 * be serialized. 5278 */ 5279 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5280 5281 /** 5282 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5283 * @sta: currently connected station 5284 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5285 * 5286 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5287 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5288 * from a connected station was received. 5289 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5290 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5291 * serialized. 5292 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5293 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5294 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5295 * checks. 5296 */ 5297 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5298 5299 /* 5300 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5301 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5302 */ 5303 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5304 5305 /** 5306 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5307 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5308 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5309 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5310 * 5311 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5312 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5313 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5314 * 5315 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5316 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5317 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5318 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5319 * 5320 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5321 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5322 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5323 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5324 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5325 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5326 * 5327 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5328 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5329 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5330 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5331 * use this API. 5332 */ 5333 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5334 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5335 5336 /** 5337 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5338 * 5339 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5340 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5341 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5342 * 5343 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5344 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5345 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5346 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5347 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5348 */ 5349 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5350 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5351 struct sk_buff *skb, 5352 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5353 int max_rates); 5354 5355 /** 5356 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5357 * 5358 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5359 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5360 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5361 * 5362 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5363 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5364 * @info: tx status information 5365 */ 5366 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5367 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5368 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5369 5370 /** 5371 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5372 * 5373 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5374 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5375 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5376 * 5377 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5378 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5379 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5380 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5381 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5382 * 5383 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5384 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5385 */ 5386 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5387 struct sk_buff *skb); 5388 5389 /** 5390 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5391 * 5392 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5393 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5394 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5395 * 5396 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5397 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5398 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5399 * 5400 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5401 * @status: tx status information 5402 */ 5403 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5404 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5405 5406 /** 5407 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5408 * 5409 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5410 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5411 * specific skbs. 5412 * 5413 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5414 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5415 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5416 * 5417 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5418 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5419 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5420 * @info: tx status information 5421 */ 5422 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5423 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5424 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5425 { 5426 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5427 .sta = sta, 5428 .info = info, 5429 }; 5430 5431 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5432 } 5433 5434 /** 5435 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5436 * 5437 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5438 * 5439 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5440 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5441 * for a single hardware. 5442 * 5443 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5444 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5445 */ 5446 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5447 struct sk_buff *skb) 5448 { 5449 local_bh_disable(); 5450 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5451 local_bh_enable(); 5452 } 5453 5454 /** 5455 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5456 * 5457 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5458 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5459 * 5460 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5461 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5462 * 5463 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5464 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5465 */ 5466 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5467 struct sk_buff *skb); 5468 5469 /** 5470 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5471 * 5472 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5473 * connected STA. 5474 * 5475 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5476 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5477 */ 5478 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5479 5480 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5481 5482 /** 5483 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5484 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5485 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5486 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5487 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5488 * should be ignored. 5489 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5490 */ 5491 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5492 u16 tim_offset; 5493 u16 tim_length; 5494 5495 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5496 u16 mbssid_off; 5497 }; 5498 5499 /** 5500 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5501 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5502 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5503 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5504 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5505 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5506 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5507 * 5508 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5509 * obtain the beacon template. 5510 * 5511 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5512 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5513 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5514 * applicable, the CSA count. 5515 * 5516 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5517 * 5518 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5519 */ 5520 struct sk_buff * 5521 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5523 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5524 unsigned int link_id); 5525 5526 /** 5527 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5528 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5529 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5530 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5531 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5532 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5533 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5534 * 5535 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5536 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5537 * requested index. 5538 * 5539 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5540 */ 5541 struct sk_buff * 5542 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5544 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5545 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5546 5547 /** 5548 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5549 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5550 * 5551 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5552 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5553 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5554 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5555 */ 5556 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5557 u8 cnt; 5558 struct { 5559 struct sk_buff *skb; 5560 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5561 } bcn[]; 5562 }; 5563 5564 /** 5565 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5566 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5567 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5568 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5569 * 5570 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5571 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5572 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5573 * one multiple BSSID element. 5574 * 5575 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5576 * 5577 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5578 * %NULL on error. 5579 */ 5580 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5581 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5582 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5583 unsigned int link_id); 5584 5585 /** 5586 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5587 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5588 * 5589 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5590 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5591 */ 5592 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5593 5594 /** 5595 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5596 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5597 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5598 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5599 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5600 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5601 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5602 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5603 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5604 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5605 * 5606 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5607 * obtain the beacon frame. 5608 * 5609 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5610 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5611 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5612 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5613 * 5614 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5615 * 5616 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5617 */ 5618 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5619 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5620 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5621 unsigned int link_id); 5622 5623 /** 5624 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5625 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5626 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5627 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5628 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5629 * 5630 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5631 * 5632 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5633 */ 5634 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5636 unsigned int link_id) 5637 { 5638 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5639 } 5640 5641 /** 5642 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5643 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5644 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5645 * 5646 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5647 * This function is called implicitly when 5648 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5649 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5650 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5651 * 5652 * Return: new countdown value 5653 */ 5654 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5655 unsigned int link_id); 5656 5657 /** 5658 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5659 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5660 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5661 * 5662 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5663 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5664 * 5665 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5666 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5667 */ 5668 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5669 5670 /** 5671 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5672 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5673 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5674 * 5675 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5676 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5677 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5678 */ 5679 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5680 5681 /** 5682 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5683 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5684 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5685 * 5686 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5687 */ 5688 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5689 unsigned int link_id); 5690 5691 /** 5692 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5693 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5694 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5695 * 5696 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5697 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5698 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5699 */ 5700 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5701 5702 /** 5703 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5704 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5705 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5706 * 5707 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5708 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5709 * 5710 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5711 * 5712 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5713 */ 5714 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5715 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5716 5717 /** 5718 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5719 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5721 * 5722 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5723 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5724 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5725 * 5726 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5727 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5728 * 5729 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5730 */ 5731 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5733 5734 /** 5735 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5736 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5737 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5738 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5739 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5740 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5741 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5742 * if at all possible 5743 * 5744 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5745 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5746 * BSSID and address is used. 5747 * 5748 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5749 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5750 * 5751 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5752 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5753 * 5754 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5755 */ 5756 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5758 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5759 5760 /** 5761 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5762 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5763 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5764 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5765 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5766 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5767 * 5768 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5769 * hardware. 5770 * 5771 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5772 */ 5773 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5774 const u8 *src_addr, 5775 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5776 size_t tailroom); 5777 5778 /** 5779 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5780 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5782 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5783 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5784 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5785 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5786 * 5787 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5788 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5789 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5790 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5791 */ 5792 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5793 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5794 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5795 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5796 5797 /** 5798 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5799 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5800 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5801 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5802 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5803 * 5804 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5805 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5806 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5807 * 5808 * Return: The duration. 5809 */ 5810 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5812 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5813 5814 /** 5815 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5816 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5818 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5819 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5820 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5821 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5822 * 5823 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5824 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5825 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5826 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5827 */ 5828 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5830 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5831 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5832 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5833 5834 /** 5835 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5836 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5837 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5838 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5839 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5840 * 5841 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5842 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5843 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5844 * 5845 * Return: The duration. 5846 */ 5847 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5849 size_t frame_len, 5850 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5851 5852 /** 5853 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5854 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5855 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5856 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5857 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5858 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5859 * 5860 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5861 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5862 * 5863 * Return: The duration. 5864 */ 5865 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5866 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5867 enum nl80211_band band, 5868 size_t frame_len, 5869 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5870 5871 /** 5872 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5873 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5875 * 5876 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5877 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5878 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5879 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5880 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5881 * 5882 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5883 * frames are available. 5884 * 5885 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5886 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5887 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5888 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5889 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5890 * use common code for all beacons. 5891 */ 5892 struct sk_buff * 5893 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5894 5895 /** 5896 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5897 * 5898 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5899 * 5900 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5901 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5902 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5903 */ 5904 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5905 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5906 5907 /** 5908 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5909 * 5910 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5911 * from the given packet. 5912 * 5913 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5914 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5915 * with this P1K 5916 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5917 */ 5918 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5919 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5920 { 5921 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5922 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5923 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5924 5925 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5926 } 5927 5928 /** 5929 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5930 * 5931 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5932 * and transmitter address. 5933 * 5934 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5935 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5936 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5937 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5938 */ 5939 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5940 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5941 5942 /** 5943 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5944 * 5945 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5946 * in the packet. 5947 * 5948 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5949 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5950 * encrypted with this key 5951 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5952 */ 5953 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5954 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5955 5956 /** 5957 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5958 * 5959 * @pos: start of crypto header 5960 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5961 * @pn: PN to add 5962 * 5963 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5964 * the packet payload) 5965 * 5966 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5967 * point to the crypto header) 5968 */ 5969 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5970 5971 /** 5972 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5973 * 5974 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5975 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5976 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5977 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5978 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5979 * 5980 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5981 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5982 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5983 * 5984 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5985 * can be done concurrently. 5986 */ 5987 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5988 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5989 5990 /** 5991 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5992 * 5993 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5994 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5995 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5996 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5997 * @seq: new sequence data 5998 * 5999 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6000 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6001 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6002 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6003 * 6004 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6005 * can be done concurrently. 6006 */ 6007 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6008 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6009 6010 /** 6011 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 6012 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6013 * 6014 * Context: Must be called with the wiphy mutex held. 6015 * 6016 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 6017 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 6018 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 6019 */ 6020 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6021 6022 /** 6023 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6024 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6025 * @keyconf: new key data 6026 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6027 * 6028 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6029 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6030 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6031 * 6032 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6033 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6034 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6035 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6036 * 6037 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6038 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6039 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6040 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6041 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6042 * of the reconfiguration. 6043 * 6044 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6045 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6046 * 6047 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6048 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 6049 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 6050 * the key that's being replaced. 6051 */ 6052 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6053 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6054 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6055 int link_id); 6056 6057 /** 6058 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6059 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6060 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6061 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6062 * @gfp: allocation flags 6063 */ 6064 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6065 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6066 6067 /** 6068 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6069 * 6070 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6071 * at the same time. 6072 * 6073 * @keyconf: the key in question 6074 */ 6075 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6076 6077 /** 6078 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6079 * 6080 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6081 * at the same time. 6082 * 6083 * @keyconf: the key in question 6084 */ 6085 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6086 6087 /** 6088 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6089 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6090 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6091 * 6092 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6093 */ 6094 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6095 6096 /** 6097 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6098 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6099 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6100 * 6101 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6102 */ 6103 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6104 6105 /** 6106 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6107 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6108 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6109 * 6110 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6111 * 6112 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6113 */ 6114 6115 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6116 6117 /** 6118 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6119 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6120 * 6121 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6122 */ 6123 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6124 6125 /** 6126 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6127 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6128 * 6129 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6130 */ 6131 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6132 6133 /** 6134 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6135 * 6136 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6137 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6138 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6139 * any context, including hardirq context. 6140 * 6141 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6142 * @info: information about the completed scan 6143 */ 6144 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6145 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6146 6147 /** 6148 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6149 * 6150 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6151 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6152 * 6153 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6154 */ 6155 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6156 6157 /** 6158 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6159 * 6160 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6161 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6162 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6163 * while associating, for instance. 6164 * 6165 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6166 */ 6167 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6168 6169 /** 6170 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6171 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6172 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6173 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6174 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6175 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6176 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6177 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6178 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6179 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6180 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6181 * for instance. 6182 */ 6183 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6184 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6185 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6186 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6187 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6188 }; 6189 6190 /** 6191 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6192 * 6193 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6194 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6195 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6196 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6197 * 6198 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6199 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6200 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6201 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6202 */ 6203 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6204 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6206 void *data); 6207 6208 /** 6209 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6210 * 6211 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6212 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6213 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6214 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6215 * be used. 6216 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6217 * 6218 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6219 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6220 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6221 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6222 */ 6223 static inline void 6224 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6225 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6226 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6227 void *data) 6228 { 6229 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6230 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6231 iterator, data); 6232 } 6233 6234 /** 6235 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6236 * 6237 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6238 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6239 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6240 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6241 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6242 * 6243 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6244 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6245 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6246 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6247 */ 6248 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6249 u32 iter_flags, 6250 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6251 u8 *mac, 6252 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6253 void *data); 6254 6255 /** 6256 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6257 * 6258 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6259 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6260 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6261 * 6262 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6263 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6264 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6265 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6266 */ 6267 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6268 u32 iter_flags, 6269 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6270 u8 *mac, 6271 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6272 void *data); 6273 6274 /** 6275 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6276 * 6277 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6278 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6279 * function for them. 6280 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6281 * 6282 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6283 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6284 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6285 */ 6286 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6287 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6288 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6289 void *data); 6290 6291 /** 6292 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6293 * 6294 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6295 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6296 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6297 * mutex. 6298 * 6299 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6300 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6301 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6302 */ 6303 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6304 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6305 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6306 void *data); 6307 6308 /** 6309 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6310 * 6311 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6312 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6313 * 6314 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6315 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6316 */ 6317 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6318 6319 /** 6320 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6321 * 6322 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6323 * workqueue. 6324 * 6325 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6326 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6327 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6328 */ 6329 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6330 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6331 unsigned long delay); 6332 6333 /** 6334 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6335 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6336 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6337 * 6338 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6339 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6340 * mac80211. 6341 * 6342 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6343 */ 6344 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6345 u16 tid); 6346 6347 /** 6348 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6349 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6350 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6351 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6352 * 6353 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6354 * 6355 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6356 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6357 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6358 */ 6359 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6360 u16 timeout); 6361 6362 /** 6363 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6364 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6365 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6366 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6367 * 6368 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6369 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6370 * from any context. 6371 */ 6372 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6373 u16 tid); 6374 6375 /** 6376 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6377 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6378 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6379 * 6380 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6381 * 6382 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6383 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6384 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6385 */ 6386 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6387 6388 /** 6389 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6390 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6391 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6392 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6393 * 6394 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6395 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6396 * can be called from any context. 6397 */ 6398 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6399 u16 tid); 6400 6401 /** 6402 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6403 * 6404 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6405 * @addr: station's address 6406 * 6407 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6408 * 6409 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6410 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6411 */ 6412 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6413 const u8 *addr); 6414 6415 /** 6416 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6417 * 6418 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6419 * @addr: remote station's address 6420 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6421 * 6422 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6423 * 6424 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6425 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6426 * 6427 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6428 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6429 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6430 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6431 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6432 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6433 * is not reliable. 6434 * 6435 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6436 */ 6437 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6438 const u8 *addr, 6439 const u8 *localaddr); 6440 6441 /** 6442 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6443 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6444 * @addr: remote station's link address 6445 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6446 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6447 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6448 * 6449 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6450 * 6451 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6452 */ 6453 struct ieee80211_sta * 6454 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6455 const u8 *addr, 6456 const u8 *localaddr, 6457 unsigned int *link_id); 6458 6459 /** 6460 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6461 * @hw: the hardware 6462 * @pubsta: the station 6463 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6464 * 6465 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6466 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6467 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6468 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6469 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6470 * 6471 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6472 * manner. 6473 * 6474 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6475 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6476 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6477 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6478 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6479 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6480 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6481 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6482 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6483 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6484 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6485 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6486 * woke up while blocked or not. 6487 */ 6488 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6489 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6490 6491 /** 6492 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6493 * @pubsta: the station 6494 * 6495 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6496 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6497 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6498 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6499 * 6500 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6501 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6502 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6503 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6504 * 6505 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6506 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6507 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6508 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6509 */ 6510 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6511 6512 /** 6513 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6514 * @pubsta: the station 6515 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6516 * 6517 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6518 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6519 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6520 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6521 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6522 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6523 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6524 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6525 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6526 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6527 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6528 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6529 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6530 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6531 */ 6532 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6533 6534 /** 6535 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6536 * @pubsta: the station 6537 * 6538 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6539 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6540 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6541 * 6542 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6543 * there is no need to call this function. 6544 */ 6545 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6546 6547 /** 6548 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6549 * 6550 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6551 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6552 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6553 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6554 * 6555 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6556 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6557 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6558 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6559 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6560 * attempts. 6561 * 6562 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6563 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6564 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6565 * them to 0. 6566 * 6567 * @pubsta: the station 6568 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6569 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6570 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6571 */ 6572 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6573 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6574 6575 /** 6576 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6577 * 6578 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6579 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6580 * 6581 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6582 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6583 */ 6584 bool 6585 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6586 6587 /** 6588 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6589 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6590 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6591 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6592 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6593 * 6594 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6595 * 6596 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6597 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6598 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6599 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6600 * 6601 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6602 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6603 * set_key callback. 6604 */ 6605 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6607 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6608 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6609 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6610 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6611 void *data), 6612 void *iter_data); 6613 6614 /** 6615 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6616 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6617 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6618 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6619 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6620 * 6621 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6622 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6623 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6624 * in removal process will be skipped. 6625 * 6626 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6627 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6628 */ 6629 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6631 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6632 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6633 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6634 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6635 void *data), 6636 void *iter_data); 6637 6638 /** 6639 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6640 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6641 * @iter: iterator function 6642 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6643 * 6644 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6645 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6646 * places while calling into the driver. 6647 * 6648 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6649 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6650 * removed. 6651 * 6652 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6653 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6654 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6655 * or not. 6656 */ 6657 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6658 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6659 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6660 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6661 void *data), 6662 void *iter_data); 6663 6664 /** 6665 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx - iterate channel contexts 6666 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6667 * @iter: iterator function 6668 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6669 * 6670 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function can only be used while 6671 * holding the wiphy mutex. 6672 * 6673 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6674 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6675 * removed. 6676 * 6677 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6678 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6679 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6680 * or not. 6681 */ 6682 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx( 6683 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6684 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6685 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6686 void *data), 6687 void *iter_data); 6688 6689 /** 6690 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6691 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6692 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6693 * 6694 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6695 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6696 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6697 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6698 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6699 * %NULL. 6700 * 6701 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6702 */ 6703 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6704 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6705 6706 /** 6707 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6708 * 6709 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6710 * 6711 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6712 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6713 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6714 */ 6715 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6716 6717 /** 6718 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6719 * 6720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6721 * 6722 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6723 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6724 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6725 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6726 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6727 * 6728 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6729 * without connection recovery attempts. 6730 */ 6731 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6732 6733 /** 6734 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6735 * 6736 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6737 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6738 * 6739 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6740 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6741 */ 6742 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6743 6744 /** 6745 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6746 * 6747 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6748 * 6749 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6750 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6751 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6752 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6753 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6754 * 6755 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6756 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6757 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6758 * disconnect normally later. 6759 * 6760 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6761 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6762 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6763 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6764 */ 6765 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6766 6767 /** 6768 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6769 * hardware restart 6770 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6771 * 6772 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6773 * hardware restart. 6774 */ 6775 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6776 6777 /** 6778 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6779 * rssi threshold triggered 6780 * 6781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6782 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6783 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6784 * @gfp: context flags 6785 * 6786 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6787 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6788 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6789 */ 6790 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6791 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6792 s32 rssi_level, 6793 gfp_t gfp); 6794 6795 /** 6796 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6797 * 6798 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6799 * @gfp: context flags 6800 */ 6801 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6802 6803 /** 6804 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6805 * 6806 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6807 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 6808 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 6809 */ 6810 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6811 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 6812 6813 /** 6814 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6815 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6816 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6817 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 6818 * false. 6819 * 6820 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6821 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6822 */ 6823 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 6824 unsigned int link_id); 6825 6826 /** 6827 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6828 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6829 * 6830 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6831 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6832 * a deauth frame in this case. 6833 */ 6834 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6835 6836 /** 6837 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6839 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6840 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6841 * 6842 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6843 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6844 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6845 */ 6846 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6847 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6848 6849 /** 6850 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6851 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6852 */ 6853 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6854 6855 /** 6856 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6857 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6858 */ 6859 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6860 6861 /** 6862 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6863 * 6864 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6865 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6866 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6867 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6868 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6869 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6870 * 6871 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6872 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6873 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6874 */ 6875 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6876 const u8 *addr); 6877 6878 /** 6879 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6880 * @pubsta: station struct 6881 * @tid: the session's TID 6882 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6883 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6884 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6885 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6886 * 6887 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6888 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6889 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6890 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6891 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 6892 */ 6893 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6894 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6895 u16 received_mpdus); 6896 6897 /** 6898 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6899 * 6900 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6901 * buffer. 6902 * 6903 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6904 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6905 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6906 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6907 */ 6908 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6909 6910 /** 6911 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6912 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6913 * @addr: station mac address 6914 * @tid: the rx tid 6915 */ 6916 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6917 unsigned int tid); 6918 6919 /** 6920 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6921 * 6922 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6923 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6924 * reordering. 6925 * 6926 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6927 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6928 * 6929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6930 * @addr: station mac address 6931 * @tid: the rx tid 6932 */ 6933 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6934 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6935 { 6936 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6937 return; 6938 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6939 } 6940 6941 /** 6942 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6943 * 6944 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6945 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6946 * reordering. 6947 * 6948 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6949 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6950 * 6951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6952 * @addr: station mac address 6953 * @tid: the rx tid 6954 */ 6955 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6956 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6957 { 6958 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6959 return; 6960 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6961 } 6962 6963 /** 6964 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6965 * 6966 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6967 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6968 * 6969 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6970 * 6971 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6972 * @addr: station mac address 6973 * @tid: the rx tid 6974 */ 6975 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6976 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6977 6978 /* Rate control API */ 6979 6980 /** 6981 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6982 * 6983 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6984 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6985 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6986 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6987 * to be filled in 6988 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6989 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6990 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6991 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6992 * RTS threshold 6993 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6994 * if the selected rate supports it 6995 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6996 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6997 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6998 */ 6999 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 7000 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 7001 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 7002 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 7003 struct sk_buff *skb; 7004 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 7005 bool rts, short_preamble; 7006 u32 rate_idx_mask; 7007 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 7008 bool bss; 7009 }; 7010 7011 /** 7012 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 7013 */ 7014 enum rate_control_capabilities { 7015 /** 7016 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 7017 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 7018 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 7019 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 7020 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 7021 */ 7022 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 7023 /** 7024 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7025 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7026 */ 7027 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7028 }; 7029 7030 struct rate_control_ops { 7031 unsigned long capa; 7032 const char *name; 7033 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7034 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7035 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7036 void (*free)(void *priv); 7037 7038 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7039 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7040 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7041 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7042 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7043 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7044 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7045 u32 changed); 7046 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7047 void *priv_sta); 7048 7049 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7050 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7051 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7052 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7053 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7054 struct sk_buff *skb); 7055 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7056 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7057 7058 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7059 struct dentry *dir); 7060 7061 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7062 }; 7063 7064 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7065 enum nl80211_band band, 7066 int index) 7067 { 7068 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7069 } 7070 7071 static inline s8 7072 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7073 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7074 { 7075 int i; 7076 7077 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7078 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7079 return i; 7080 7081 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7082 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7083 7084 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7085 return 0; 7086 } 7087 7088 static inline 7089 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7090 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7091 { 7092 unsigned int i; 7093 7094 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7095 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7096 return true; 7097 return false; 7098 } 7099 7100 /** 7101 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7102 * 7103 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7104 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7105 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7106 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7107 * 7108 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7109 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7110 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7111 * 7112 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7113 */ 7114 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7115 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7116 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7117 7118 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7119 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7120 7121 static inline bool 7122 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7123 { 7124 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7125 } 7126 7127 static inline bool 7128 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7129 { 7130 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7131 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7132 } 7133 7134 static inline bool 7135 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7136 { 7137 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7138 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7139 } 7140 7141 static inline bool 7142 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7143 { 7144 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7145 } 7146 7147 static inline bool 7148 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7149 { 7150 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7151 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7152 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7153 } 7154 7155 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7156 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7157 { 7158 if (p2p) { 7159 switch (type) { 7160 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7161 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7162 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7163 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7164 default: 7165 break; 7166 } 7167 } 7168 return type; 7169 } 7170 7171 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7172 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7173 { 7174 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7175 } 7176 7177 /** 7178 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7179 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7180 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7181 * 7182 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7183 */ 7184 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7185 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7187 { 7188 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7189 } 7190 7191 /** 7192 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7193 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7194 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7195 * 7196 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7197 */ 7198 static inline __le16 7199 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7200 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7201 { 7202 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7203 } 7204 7205 /** 7206 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif 7207 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7208 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7209 * 7210 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7211 */ 7212 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7213 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7214 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7215 { 7216 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7217 } 7218 7219 /** 7220 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7221 * 7222 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7223 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7224 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7225 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7226 * 7227 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7228 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7229 * matching GroupId management frame. 7230 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7231 */ 7232 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7233 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7234 7235 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7236 int rssi_min_thold, 7237 int rssi_max_thold); 7238 7239 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7240 7241 /** 7242 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7243 * 7244 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7245 * 7246 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7247 * 7248 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7249 * applicable. 7250 */ 7251 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7252 7253 /** 7254 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7255 * @vif: virtual interface 7256 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7257 * @gfp: allocation flags 7258 * 7259 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7260 */ 7261 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7262 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7263 gfp_t gfp); 7264 7265 /** 7266 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7267 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7268 * @vif: virtual interface 7269 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7270 * @band: the band to transmit on 7271 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7272 * 7273 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise 7274 * 7275 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7276 */ 7277 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7278 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7279 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7280 7281 /** 7282 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7283 * of injected frames. 7284 * 7285 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7286 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7287 * of the skb before calling this function. 7288 * 7289 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7290 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7291 * 7292 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7293 */ 7294 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7295 struct net_device *dev); 7296 7297 /** 7298 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7299 * 7300 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7301 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7302 * 7303 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7304 * 7305 * private: 7306 * 7307 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7308 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7309 */ 7310 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7311 u32 next_tsf; 7312 bool has_next_tsf; 7313 7314 u8 absent; 7315 7316 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7317 struct { 7318 u32 start; 7319 u32 duration; 7320 u32 interval; 7321 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7322 }; 7323 7324 /** 7325 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7326 * 7327 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7328 * @data: NoA tracking data 7329 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7330 * 7331 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7332 */ 7333 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7334 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7335 7336 /** 7337 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7338 * 7339 * @data: NoA tracking data 7340 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7341 */ 7342 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7343 7344 /** 7345 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7346 * @vif: virtual interface 7347 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7348 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7349 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7350 * @gfp: allocation flags 7351 * 7352 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7353 */ 7354 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7355 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7356 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7357 7358 /** 7359 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7360 * 7361 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7362 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7363 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7364 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7365 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7366 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7367 * 7368 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7369 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7370 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7371 * 7372 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7373 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7374 * 7375 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7376 */ 7377 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7378 7379 /** 7380 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7381 * 7382 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7383 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7384 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7385 * 7386 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7387 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7388 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7389 * 7390 * @sta: the station 7391 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7392 */ 7393 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7394 7395 /** 7396 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7397 * 7398 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7399 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7400 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7401 * 7402 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7403 * 7404 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7405 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7406 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7407 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7408 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7409 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7410 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7411 * 7412 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7413 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7414 */ 7415 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7416 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7417 7418 /** 7419 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7420 * (in process context) 7421 * 7422 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7423 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7424 * 7425 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7426 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7427 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7428 * 7429 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7430 */ 7431 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7432 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7433 { 7434 struct sk_buff *skb; 7435 7436 local_bh_disable(); 7437 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7438 local_bh_enable(); 7439 7440 return skb; 7441 } 7442 7443 /** 7444 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7445 * 7446 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7447 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7448 * 7449 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7450 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7451 */ 7452 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7453 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7454 7455 /** 7456 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7457 * 7458 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7459 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7460 * 7461 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7462 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7463 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7464 */ 7465 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7466 7467 /** 7468 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7469 * 7470 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7471 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7472 * 7473 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7474 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7475 */ 7476 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7477 7478 /* (deprecated) */ 7479 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7480 { 7481 } 7482 7483 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7484 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7485 7486 /** 7487 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7488 * 7489 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7490 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7491 * 7492 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7493 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7494 * 7495 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7496 * this TXQ internally. 7497 */ 7498 static inline void 7499 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7500 { 7501 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7502 } 7503 7504 /** 7505 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7506 * 7507 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7508 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7509 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7510 * 7511 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7512 * internally. 7513 */ 7514 static inline void 7515 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7516 bool force) 7517 { 7518 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7519 } 7520 7521 /** 7522 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7523 * 7524 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7525 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7526 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7527 * next_txq(). 7528 * 7529 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7530 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7531 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7532 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7533 * again. 7534 * 7535 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7536 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7537 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7538 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7539 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7540 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7541 * 7542 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7543 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7544 * 7545 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7546 */ 7547 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7548 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7549 7550 /** 7551 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7552 * 7553 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7554 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7555 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7556 * 7557 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7558 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7559 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7560 */ 7561 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7562 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7563 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7564 7565 /** 7566 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7567 * 7568 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7569 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7570 * 7571 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7572 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7573 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7574 * @gfp: allocation flags 7575 */ 7576 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7577 u8 inst_id, 7578 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7579 gfp_t gfp); 7580 7581 /** 7582 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7583 * 7584 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7585 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7586 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7587 * 7588 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7589 * @match: match event information 7590 * @gfp: allocation flags 7591 */ 7592 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7593 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7594 gfp_t gfp); 7595 7596 /** 7597 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7598 * 7599 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7600 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7601 * 7602 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7603 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7604 * information. 7605 * @len: frame length in bytes 7606 * 7607 * Return: the airtime estimate 7608 */ 7609 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7610 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7611 int len); 7612 7613 /** 7614 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7615 * 7616 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7617 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7618 * 7619 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7620 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7621 * @len: frame length in bytes 7622 * 7623 * Return: the airtime estimate 7624 */ 7625 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7626 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7627 int len); 7628 /** 7629 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7630 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7631 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7632 * 7633 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7634 * 7635 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7636 */ 7637 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7639 7640 /** 7641 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7642 * probe response template. 7643 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7644 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7645 * 7646 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7647 * 7648 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7649 */ 7650 struct sk_buff * 7651 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7653 7654 /** 7655 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7656 * collision. 7657 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 7658 * 7659 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7660 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7661 * aware of. 7662 */ 7663 void 7664 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7665 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 7666 7667 /** 7668 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7669 * 7670 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7671 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7672 * 7673 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7674 * 7675 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 7676 */ 7677 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7678 { 7679 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7680 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7681 7682 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7683 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7684 } 7685 7686 /** 7687 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7688 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7689 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7690 * 7691 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 7692 * back into the driver. 7693 * 7694 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7695 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7696 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7697 * 7698 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7699 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7700 * a sequence of calls like 7701 * 7702 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7703 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7704 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7705 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7706 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7707 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7708 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7709 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7710 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7711 * 7712 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7713 */ 7714 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7715 7716 /** 7717 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7718 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7719 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7720 * 7721 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7722 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7723 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7724 * completed after it returns. 7725 */ 7726 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7727 u16 active_links); 7728 7729 /** 7730 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 7731 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 7732 * 7733 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 7734 * TTLM request. 7735 */ 7736 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7737 7738 /** 7739 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 7740 * @width: the channel width value to convert 7741 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 7742 */ 7743 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 7744 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 7745 { 7746 switch (width) { 7747 default: 7748 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7749 fallthrough; 7750 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 7751 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 7752 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 7753 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 7754 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 7755 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 7756 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 7757 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 7758 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 7759 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 7760 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 7761 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 7762 } 7763 } 7764 7765 /** 7766 * ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw - prepare for sending BW RX OMI 7767 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI is going to be sent to 7768 * @bw: the bandwidth requested 7769 * 7770 * When the driver decides to do RX OMI to change bandwidth with a STA 7771 * it calls this function to prepare, then sends the OMI, and finally 7772 * calls ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(). 7773 * 7774 * Note that the (link) STA rate control is updated accordingly as well, 7775 * but the chanctx might not be updated if there are other users. 7776 * If the intention is to reduce the listen bandwidth, the driver must 7777 * ensure there are no TDLS stations nor other uses of the chanctx. 7778 * 7779 * Also note that in order to sequence correctly, narrowing bandwidth 7780 * will only happen in ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(), whereas widening 7781 * again (e.g. going back to normal) will happen here. 7782 * 7783 * Note that we treat this symmetrically, so if the driver calls this 7784 * and tells the peer to only send with a lower bandwidth, we assume 7785 * that the driver also wants to only send at that lower bandwidth, to 7786 * allow narrowing of the chanctx request for this station/interface. 7787 * 7788 * Finally, the driver must ensure that if the function returned %true, 7789 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw() is also called, even for example in 7790 * case of HW restart. 7791 * 7792 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held, and will call back 7793 * into the driver, so ensure no driver locks are held. 7794 * 7795 * Return: %true if changes are going to be made, %false otherwise 7796 */ 7797 bool ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 7798 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bw); 7799 7800 /** 7801 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw - finalize BW RX OMI update 7802 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI was sent to 7803 * 7804 * See ieee80211_client_prepare_rx_omi_bw(). Context is the same here 7805 * as well. 7806 */ 7807 void ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta); 7808 7809 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 7810 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7811 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7812 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7813 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7814 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7815 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 7816 u32 changed); 7817 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7818 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 7819 int n_vifs, 7820 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 7821 7822 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7823